新世纪视听说教程2答案听力原文unit1

合集下载

新世纪视听说教程第二册听力原文及答案之欧阳数创编

新世纪大学英语 2 optional listeningUnit One, Book 2Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box?Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes.B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s persona l! I wrote about my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it.G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My yearbook. It’s my high school book of memories.B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…Listening 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervous about traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didn’t want to go home! Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journal entries. It’s not hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,” “ Family travel,” “Memories of mygrandparents,”“ Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, and Why. This will make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future.Listening 4Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed.In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will be successful), and the “ best dressed” (a student with a good fashion sense). There are also other awards and categories.Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or “ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together.Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbookB. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful booksto hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”，“Baby’s first year”.5. Use imaginat ion to design the pages, and then decorate them with felt pens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon. 3.Yes; 4. At the end of the year.5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6.titles; 7. sign; 8. memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she was in college;8. had no friends;9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standing at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your mot her M: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I’m going to the library to study.M: For what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week.M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater?M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here.W: Are you sure? What street is this?M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening.P: You’re really busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to PacificUniversity.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a project about community safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS and drugs in our community.J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community.Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many gestures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch each other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed.People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t poi nt at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them.Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers; 4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great; 4. project; 5. AIDS; 6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous; 6. business card; 7. jump and nod; 8. for luck; 9. start laughing; 10. relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrate and support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products. Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t like it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” Tha t means I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. I like anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually p refer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica.Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People have healthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, the Okinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birth records from 1879. They didn’t expect to find many centenarians in the records. They were very surpri sed to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The United States, for example, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34 centenarians per 100,100 people!What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they eat a healthy diet. T hey eat many fresh fruits andvegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. But researchers think that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They don’t do hard exercise such asweightlifting or jogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activities like gardening and walking.Researchers say that older Okinawans also have a good attitude about aging. They sit quietly and relax their minds with deep breathing exercised. They also enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B. 1. fast; 2.life; 3. farmers; 4.Europe; 5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in the world. It it bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea;How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. gets covered with; 7.judging starts; 8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale. I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable now.I: It looks old-fashionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m from Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pants after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t understand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!Optional Listening 3A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be co mfortable! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hai r red. What do you think?Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer. A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?Exp ert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trendspotter. I was nervous and didn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about becoming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. The “Trends Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool!Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One card said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said, “No way!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popul ar right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have cards. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you like?” “Why do you like them?” “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our tour. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff!That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New YorkVicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usualElena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashionedVicki: mother, classicOL2：A. fc b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test.OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time.have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance.OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do.2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song was “OK”, and which one was “No way”.4. They just talked about the covers they liked.5. They are going to look at some new fashions.C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary2. week, Not month3. six CD covers, not one CD cover4. a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” cardOL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase; 5. gets tired; 6.stop to rest; 7. had better; 8. get some ice cream; 9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So, we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good we ekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story just in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious lights … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to seem like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa?A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walked away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in. I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?” I asked. “Oh yes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five years ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during ane xperiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly.Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a sma ll town in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. Di fferent people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. N o. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1: A. 从左至右：4-5-1-2-3B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly; OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3(second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off2. lots of damage3. its engine exploded4. used electricity5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a3. h4. d5. g6. e7. b8. cB. 1. different people see different lights2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment; 5. showing; 6. has an alibi; 7. it isn’t true; 8. walks in; 9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, but I didn’t have any clothes on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed. Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare.Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It ra n toward me, but I couldn’t move.Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep.Conversation 3Man1: Morning Tim.Man2: Morning. Hey, I had an amazing dream last night. I was on a beautiful boat. The sun was warm and the ocean was really blue. I jumped into the water, and I began to swam with the fish. The thing is, I can’t swim. But in the dream, I could. It was pretty cool. Optional Listening 2I had an amazing dream last night. I was standing outside of an strange big house. The house was painted pink, a very rare color for a house. It had a lot of big windows, either round or rectangular. The house had large square pillars and twisted columns. I was thinking there must be a big living room, several bedrooms, a kitchen, and a guest room in。

新世纪视听说教程2答案听力原文

新世纪视听说教程2答案听力原文u n i t1(总7页)-CAL-FENGHAI.-(YICAI)-Company One1-CAL-本页仅作为文档封面，使用请直接删除新世纪大学英语视听说教程2unit1听力原文In this section, you will hear several conversations. At the end of each conversation, one or more questions will be asked about what was said. Both the conversations and the questions will be spoken only once. After each question there will be a pause. During the pause, you must read the four choices marked A), B), C) and D), and decide which is the best answer.</text>1A: Lucy, I saw Jeff the other day on the street.B: Oh, I thought he went to New York.<She saw Jeff in New YorkShe was a friend to JeffShe didn't believe Jeff. n>She was surprised to hear that2A: Good morning, your card please.B: I'm sorry this is my first time to borrow books. Can you tell me what to do<In a school canteen.In a classroom.In a library.In a hospital.A: Good morning, sir. I'm a news reporter from . Now would you mind answering a few questionsB: Uh ... sure.A: What's your nameB: David Brown. My friends call me Dave.A: So, David, what do you do for livingB: I'm a real estate agent.A: That's great. And do you like your jobB: Well ... I should say yes. You know, this isn't an easy job. Spent a lot of time running around, making appointments with people. But I like it.A: Terrific. Where do you want to liveB: Uh ... that depends. Right now I want to live here because Chicago is a big city and I have my job here. But after I retire, I'd like to move to the countryside.A: Sounds interesting. Now who do you think is the most important person in your lifeB: My wife of course. She's the mother of our three sons and she's a great mother.A: That's good. Thanks very much for talking to us, David.B: You're welcome.<3 Who is the woman David talks toA newspaper editor.A news reporter.A writerA researcher.<4Where does David want to live nowIn Chicago.< >In New York.In the countryside.In a foreign country.5The most important person in David's life is _____.his fatherhis motherhis sonhis wife/>-"Section B"/>In this section, you will hear several short passages. At the end of each passage,you will hear some questions. Both the passage and the questionswill be spoken only once. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A), B), C) and D).-原文Friendship is not a state of mind; it's an act, a balanced relationship between people. It varies from person to person. Our friends are the people who are ready to help us during times of distress, who we share most of our thoughts with. Friendship and love are not quite the same thing, although there's a lot of love around friendship. We are always sure that our friend will understand why we acted in a certain way. We need not explain anything to our very good friends. But the main difference between love and friendship is that in love, the two individuals share a certain intimacy, which is greater than friendship. An important element in love is the physical element. No matter how close you are with your friend, it does not mean physical intimacy. In love, individuals generally have only one partner. You may have many people whom you could call friends but there exists only one person with whom you are in love. A loving relationship makes one so much attached to the other that one feels pain if the other one is hurt. Friendship may last for a lifetime as does love, but then the time spent by the individuals with each other is more exciting in love than in friendship. Life without love is like a year without spring. One could say that love is friendship plus physical closeness.Questions 6 to 10 are based on the passage you have just heard.6 Friends are people with whom _____.we spend time withwe identify ourselveswe share most of our thoughtswe talk about the past</7 What element can be found in love, but not in friendshipPhysical closeness.Emotional closenessDeep trust.Willingness to share everything.is TRUE about friends and partnersYou can have many friends and many partners.You can have many friends, but only one partner.You can have only one friend, but many partners.You can have only one friend and only one partner.9In a loving relationship, if one is hurt, the other ____.takes care of him/her >comforts him/her >spends much time with him/herfeels pain10．Life without love is like a year without _____.</text>springsummerautumnwinter原文； It is common practice to introduce people when you arestarting a friendship. Then what should you do in such introductions For the first time, introduce individuals to each other using both first and last names. If you're introducing someone who has a title like "doctor", you should include the title as well as the first and last names in the introduction. Introduce the younger or less known person to the older ormore famous person first, regardless of the sex of the individuals. However, if a considerable age difference lies between the two, it is far more polite to make introductions out of respect to age, no matter what the social rank is. If the person you are introducing has a specific relationship to you, make the relationship clear by adding a phrase such as "my boss", "my wife"or "my uncle". In the case of unmarried couples who are living together, "companion" and "partner" are good choices. If you are introducing your husband or wife, use your spouse's first and last name if he or she has a different last name than you. Include the phrase "my wife" or "my husband". Introduce an individual to the group first, then the group to the individual. For example: "Dr. Brown, I'd like you to meet my friends Kym Hsu, Shawn Kampbell and Michael Via. Everyone, this is Dr. Kurt Brown."Questions 11 to 15 are based on the passage you have just heard.the first time, you must include a person's ____ in introduction.last name and titlefirst name and titlesocial rankfirst name and last name12 If you are introducing a man and a woman about the same age with one more famous than the other, you should _____.introduce the man to the women firstintroduce the woman to the man firstintroduce the more famous to the less famous firstintroduce the less famous to the more famous first13. If you are introducing your unmarried partner, you can use the word _____.lover >spouse<companionbuddy14How should a man introduce his wife who has a different last name than his<Using "my wife" onlyUsing her last name and "my wife" only.Using her first name and "my wife" onlyUsing her first name, last name, and "my wife".should you introduce an individual and a group to each other Introducing everyone in the group to the individual first.Introducing the individual to the group first.Introducing the group as a whole to the individual first.Asking the people in the group to introduce themselves.In this section, you will hear several sentences. Listen carefully and then repeat.">The special person in my family is my grandfather.He’s always kind to me and supportive.We’re colleagues. We work in the same department.We’re both taking accounting this semester.My friends are important to me because I like to go out with them and I can talk to them about most things原文：Last month I received a call, and it was from a college classmate I hadn't seen for years. He said he had just settled down in Shanghai and wanted to come over to visit me. I was overjoyed at that time because he was one of my best friends in college. Then on the following weekend he visited me. That was an old buddy reunion. Sounds good, isn't it He told me he was working for a big company and that he liked his job very much. After so many years I'm surprised that the man has changed little. Still honest and humorous. And yes, he's going to be married next week and invited me to the wedding party.-<Look at the picture below, which is about Sam, the boy, and a nice interesting happened between them and became Sam's favorite memory. Suppose you are Sam and now you have grown up. Looking at the picture, you remember what happened and want to share it with us. You'll have 1 minute to prepare and another 2 minutes to complete your presentation. Now you have 1 minute to prepare.<-True or False. Watch the video clip and decide whether the following statements are True (T) or False (F).<text>People We Like Woo Sung: Hi, my name is Woo Sung Chung.Dayanne: Hi, my name is Dayanne Leal. My nickname is Day. D-A-Y.Jonathan: Hi, I'm Jonathan Najman. My nickname is Johnny.Agnes: Hi. I am Agnes Tounkara. My first name, Agnes, is spelled A-G-N-E-S.My last name is spelled T-O-U-N-K-A-R-A.Brad: My name is Brad Fotsch. My first name, Brad, is spelled B-R-A-D. My last name Fotsch, is spelled F-O-T-S-C-H.Calum: Hi. My name is Calum Docherty. I'm from Glasgow in Scotland. I'm 18 years old and I'm a student at Harvard University.Jonathan: I'm from Guatemala City, Guatemala, and I'm a computer engineer. Hana: Hi, my name is Hana Lee. I'm 20 years old. I'm a student at Boston College and l'm from Douglaston, New York.Dayanne: My favorite actor is Antonio Banderas.Woo Sung: My favorite actress is Julia Roberts.Kevin: My favorite actress is Angelina （岭师分享群4发布）Jolie becauseI think she is the most beautiful woman in the world. t><Dayanne's nickname is Day.</text>TFJonathan's nickname is Najman.TFAgnes's last name is Toukara.TFBrad's nickname is Brady.TFBrad's last name is Fotsch.TF"Section BFill in the blanks. Watch the video clip a and fill in the blanks with the words you hear.->Calum: Hi. My name is Calum Docherty. I'm from Glasgow inScotland . I'm18 years|eighteen years old and I'm a student at Harvard University .Jonathan: I'm from Guatemala City, Guatemala, and I'm a computerengineer .Hana: Hi, my name is Hana Lee. I'm 20 years|twenty years old. I'm a student at Boston College and I'm from Douglaston, NewYork . ...Kevin: My favorite actress is Angelina Jolie because I think she is the most beautiful woman in the world.（岭师分享群4发布）></。

大学英语新世纪视听说第二册听力原文及答案

新世纪大学英语视听说教程2的optional listening 原文及答案免费下载Unit One, Book 22-1-3------- 2-1-4 ------ Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box?Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes.B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s personal! I wrote about my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it.G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My ye arbook. It’s my high school book of memories.B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…Listening 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervous about traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home.I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I did n’t want to go home!Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journal entries. It’s not hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,” “ Family travel,” “Memories of my grandparents,”“ Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, and Why. Thiswill make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future.Listening 4Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed.In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will be successful), and the “ best dressed” (a student with a good fashion sense). There are also other awards and categories.Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or “ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together.Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbook B. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents andhe saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”，“Baby’s first year”.5. Use imagination to design the pages, and then decorate them with felt pens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon.3.Yes;4. At the end of the year.5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6. titles; 7. sign;8. memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she was in college;8. had no friends;9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standing at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your motherM: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I’m going to the library to study. M: For what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week. M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater? M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here.W: Are you sure? What street is this?M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening.P: You’re really busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to Pacific University.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a p roject about community safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS and drugs in our community.J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community.Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many gestures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch e ach other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed.People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t point at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them.Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maoriare the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers;4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great;4. project;5. AIDS;6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous;6. business card;7. jump and nod;8. for luck;9. start laughing;10. relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrateand support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products.Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t like it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” That means I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal.I like anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually prefer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica.Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People have healthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, the Okinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birth records from 1879. They didn’t expect to find many centenarians in the records. They were very surprised to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The United States, for example, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34 centenarians per 100,100 people!What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they e at a healthy diet. They eat many fresh fruits and vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. But researchers think that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They don’t do hard exercise such as weightlifting or jogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activities like gardening and walking. Researchers say that older Okinawans also have a good attitude about aging. They sit quietly and relax their minds with deep breathing exercised. They also enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B.1. fast;2.life;3. farmers;4. Europe;5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in the world. It it bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea; How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off;6. gets covered with;7. judging starts;8. tastes the other dishes;9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale.I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable no w.I: It looks old-fashionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m from Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pants after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t understand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!Optional Listening 3A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always w ear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear l ong skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer.A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?Expert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trendspotter. I was nervous and didn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about bec oming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. The “Trends Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool!Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One card said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said, “No way!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popular right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have car ds. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you like?” “Why do you like them?” “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our tour. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff!That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New York Vicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usual Elena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashioned Vicki: mother, classicOL2：A. f c b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test.OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time.have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance. OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do. 2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song was “OK”, and which one was “No way”. 4. Theyjust talked about the covers they liked. 5. They are going to look at some new fashions.C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary 2. week, Not month 3. six CD covers, not one CD cover 4. a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” cardOL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase;5. gets tired;6.stop to rest;7. had better;8. get some ice cream;9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So, we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good weekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story ju st in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious lights … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to seem like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa?A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax! Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walked away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in. I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?”I asked. “Oh yes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. Shedied five years ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern.Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible thata part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during an experiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly.Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a small town in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. Different people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so? A. No. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs.I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1: A. 从左至右：4-5-1-2-3 B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly;OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3 (second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off 2. lots of damage 3. its engine exploded 4. used electricity 5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a 3. h 4. d 5. g 6. e 7. b 8. cB. 1. different people see different lights 2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment;5. showing;6. has an alibi;7. it isn’t true;8. walks in;9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, but I didn’t have any clothes on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed. Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare. Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It ran toward me, but I couldn’t move.Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep.Conversation 3。

新世纪视听说教程第二册听力原文及答案之欧阳道创编

新世纪大学英语 2 optionalUnit One, Book 2Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box?Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes.B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s persona l! I wrote about my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it. G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My yearbook. It’s my high school book of memories.B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…Listening 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervous about traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a longtime to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didn’t want to go home!Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journal entries. It’s not hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,” “ Family travel,” “Memories of my grandparents,”“ Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, and Why. This will make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future. Listening 4Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed. In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will be successful), and the “ best dressed” (a student with a good fashion sense). There are also other awards and categories. Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or “ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together.Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbookB. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”，“Baby’s first year”.5. Use imaginat ion to design the pages, and then decorate them with felt pens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon. 3.Yes; 4. At the end of the year.5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6. titles; 7.sign; 8. memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she was in college;8. had no friends;9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standing at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your mot herM: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going? W: I’m going to the library to study. M: For what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week. M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater? M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here. W: Are you sure? What street is this? M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening.P: You’re really busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to PacificUniversity.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a project about community safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS and drugs in our community.J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community.Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many gestures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch each other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed.People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t poi nt at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them.Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers; 4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great; 4. project; 5. AIDS; 6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek);5. in the eyes;6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous; 6. business card; 7. jump and nod; 8. for luck; 9. start laughing; 10. relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrate and support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products.Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t like it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” Tha t means I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. I like anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually p refer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica.Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People havehealthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, the Okinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birth records from 1879. They didn’t expect to find many centenarians in the records. They were verysurprised to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The United States,for example, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34centenarians per 100,100 people!What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they eat a healthy diet. T hey eat many fresh fruitsand vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. Butresearchers think that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They don’t dohard exercise such as weightlifting or jogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activitieslike gardening and walking. Researchers say that older Okinawans also have a goodattitude about aging. They sit quietly and relax their minds with deep breathing exercised.They also enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B. 1. fast; 2.life; 3. farmers;4. Europe;5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in theworld. It it bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea;How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breathing exercises,massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. gets covered with; 7.judging starts; 8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale.I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable now.I: It looks old-fashionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m from Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pants after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t understand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!欧阳道创编 2021.03.06Optional Listening 3A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be co mfortable! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hai r red. What do you think?Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer. A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?Exp ert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trendspotter. I was nervous and didn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about becoming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. The “Trends Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool!Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One card said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said, “Noway!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popul ar right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have cards. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you like?” “Why do you like them?” “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our tour. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff! That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New YorkVicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usualElena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashionedVicki: mother, classicOL2：A. fc b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test.OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time. have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance.OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do.2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song was “OK”, and which one was “No way”.4. They just talked about the covers they liked.5. They are going to look at some new fashions.C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary2. week, Not month3. six CD covers, not one CD cover4. a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” cardOL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase; 5. gets tired; 6.stop to rest; 7. had better; 8. get some ice cream; 9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So, we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good we ekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story just in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious lights … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to seem like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa?A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walked away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in. I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?” I asked. “Oh yes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five years ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during ane xperiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly. Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a sma ll town in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. Di fferent people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. N o. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1: A. 从左至右：4-5-1-2-3B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly;OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3(second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off2. lots of damage3. its engine exploded4. used electricity5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a3. h4. d5. g6. e7. b8. cB. 1. different people see different lights2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment; 5. showing; 6. has an alibi; 7. it isn’t true; 8. walks in; 9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, but I didn’t have any clothes on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed.Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare.Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It ra n toward me, but I couldn’t move.Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep.Conversation 3Man1: Morning Tim.Man2: Morning. Hey, I had an amazing dream last night. I was on a beautiful boat. The sun was warm and the ocean was really blue. I jumped into the water, and I began to swam with the fish. The thing is, I can’t swim. But in the dream, I could. It was pretty cool.Optional Listening 2I had an amazing dream last night. I was standing outside of an strange big house. The house was painted pink, a very rare color for a house. It had a lot of big windows, either round or rectangular. The house had large square pillars and twisted columns. I was thinking there must be a big living room, several bedrooms, a kitchen, and a guest room in such a big house. I was wondering whose house this was when I suddenly heard a voice from somewhere: “My lord, welcome home.” Wow, this was my dream house.I went inside and walked into my living room. It was spacious. There were sofas, a table, a big-screen TV, and a stereo system. It was pretty cool. All my best friends were there, too. But somehow they didn’t speak, didn’t smile, and didn’t even move. And then suddenly they all disappeared. I was scared. What a terrible dream.I then went to the kitchen. It was also spacious. There were all kinds of kitchen equipment, including a gas stove, a refrigerator, and an oven. There also many electric appliances, such as a microwave oven, an electric mixer, and a food processor.I liked the food processor the most, which made life much easier. There was also a dining table in the middle of the room. The whole family was sitting around the table, waiting for the meal to be served. But the fridge was empty, and the gas stove didn’t work. And there was no electricity at all for the microwave oven and the the food processor. The hungry kids started to cry. I was in despair. And then suddenly I woke up.Optional Listening 3Sleep and dreamsScientists know that the brain is very active when a person is sleeping. There are five stages, or parts, of sleep. Stage 1 starts after you fall asleep. If there is a noise or a bright light, you wake up very easily. In stage 2, your brain waves are very slow. In stage 3 and 4, you are in deep sleep. It’s very difficult to wake up then. Your body rests and grows during these stages. Stage 5 is when you dream. Your eyes move a lot, and your brain waves are fast. This stage of sleep is very important for your memory. After stage 5, you wake up a little, and then stage 1 starts again. We go through the five stages of sleep four or five times every night, so we have many dreams in one night.How much sleep do you need? The answer depends on your age. Babies should sleep 15 to 16 hours every day. Children and teenagers need 9 or 10 hpurs of sleep, but older people only need 6 to 8 hours. If you sleep for only four hours one night, you may just feel tired the next day. But many nights of bad sleep can be bad for your health. People who don’t get enough sleep get sick more often. And sle ep is very important for learning. It’s one reason why students should go to bed early.Optional Listening 4The meaning of dreamsFor centuries, people have asked: why do we dream? What do our dreams mean? Today, science doesn’t have definite answers to t hese questions, but we do know some things about dreams. First, we all dream, often 4 to 5 times a night. Second, we don’t usually remember most of our dreams. And finally, when we dream, our brains are very active.。

新视野大学英语视听说教程2 听力答案unit1 unit text

Part I ScriptDirections: Listen to the short dialogs, and then choose the correct answers to the questions. You will hear the recording twice. After the first playing, there will be time for you to choose the correct answers. Use the second playing to check your answers.1.(Listen to the audio recording for the question.)A. Heavy metal.B. Rock.C. Golden oldies.D. Pop music.2.(Listen to the audio recording for the question.)A. She is from Hong Kong.B. She is familiar with the Hong Kong singers.C. She is not familiar with the music they are listening to.D. She enjoys the music they are listening to.3.(Listen to the audio recording for the question.)A. The man won't turn on the stereo for the woman.B. The woman loves fast music.C. Slow music can give people energy according to the man.D. Fast music can give people energy according to the man.4.(Listen to the audio recording for the question.)A. The man thinks the tickets are inexpensive while the woman thinks they are expensive.B. The man thinks the tickets are expensive while the woman thinks they are inexpensive.C. They both think the tickets are expensive.D. They both think the tickets are inexpensive.5.(Listen to the audio recording for the question.)A. The man probably moved in not long ago.B. The woman probably moved in not long ago.C. The man is interested in the bass.D. The woman wants to finish the party as early as possible.Part II ScriptDirections: Listen to the following recording, and then fill in the blanks with the missing words. You will hear the recording twice. After the first playing, there will be time to write the missing words. Use the second playing to check your answers.W:Oh, Backstreet Boys! They were my (1) ________ last year.M:(2)_______W:Yes, though my interest is (3)______ so strong. You see, I was once(4)_________ of them.M:I know you (5)______ posters and bought every CD they ever made.W:I also went to almost every concert they had—even (6)_______ in Canada! M:Don't you think that was strange? (7)________ over some strangers?W:(8)_______. But students have too much (9)_________. We have to spenda lot of time studying...M:Which leads you to (10)________ with pop stars? I don't (11)_______. W:You see, under great pressure, we need relaxation (12)______. And...M:(13)_______!W:In a sec! Let's watch this (14)_______ first!Correct answerfavorite bandNot anymoreno longera big fancollectedthe onesGoing crazyMaybe to youpressurefall in loveget itfrom time to timeGo onmusic videoPart III ScriptDirections: Listen to the following recording, and then choose the correct answers to the questions. You will hear the recording twice. After the first playing, there will be time for you to choose the correct answers. Use the second playing to check your answers.1. What has Williams recently said?A. Music piracy is costing the music industry a lot of money.B. Music piracy is a good thing.C. Music piracy promotes the popularity of his songs.D. Music piracy should be banned.2. Why is Williams so rich now?A. He has recently inherited a lot of money.B. He has benefited a great deal from music piracy.C. He has got lots of money from the record companies.D. He has received large donations from his fans.3. When Williams asked the record companies about the issue of music piracy,what responses did he get from them?A. They were angry but would not do anything about it.B. They found themselves helpless.C. They did not care since they could get lots of money from over-pricedCDs.D. They were angry and were trying to settle the issue in court.4. What examples of music piracy are mentioned in the passage?A. Online song-sharing.B. CD copying.C. Downloading songs from the Internet.D. Both A) and B).5. What is the speaker's tone about music piracy?A. Neutral.B. Negative.C. Positive.D. Sarcastic.Part IVDirections: Choose the best answer to each of the following statements.1.When the audience cried "Encore", the singer was overjoyed with the_________ from the audience.A. answerB. replyC. responseD. return2.In 1781, he left for Vienna, where he was in great ________ as both aperformer and a composition teacher.A. necessityB. needC. wantD. demand3.Although Mozart lived only a short life, he _______ over 600 works.A. composedB. composed ofC. composed inD. was composed of4.In 1916, Patty took legal action ________ Mr. Coleman.A. overB. againstC. withD. for5.His music from the next decade was not very popular, and he eventually fellback on his teaching jobs ______ a living.A. forB. toC. onD. with6.From that time _____, Mozart was performing in concerts and writing music.A. aheadB. forthC. onD. down7.We sometimes danced _____ the music in a karaoke bar.A. atB. forC. withD. to8.Let's go for ______ before we go to _________.A. lunch ... concertB. the lunch ... the concertC. lunch ... the concertD. the lunch ... concert9.Before the age of four, Mozart ______ great musical talent.A. has shownB. had shownC. had been shownD. have showed10.After Patty Hill became the head of the Department of KindergartenEducation, a gentleman ________ Robert Coleman published the song.A. called the name ofB. at the nameC. by the name ofD. in the name of。

新世纪视听说教程第二册听力原文及答案之欧阳生创编

新世纪大学英语 2 optional listeningUnit One, Book 2Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box?Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes.B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something thatgives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s person al! I wrote about myfirst boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it.G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My yearbook. It’s my hig h school book of memories. B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…Listening 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervous about traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didn’t want to go home!Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journal entries. It’snot hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,” “ Family travel,” “Memories of my grandparents,”“ Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, and Why. This will make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future.Listening 4Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed.In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will be successful), and the “ best dressed” (a student with a good fashion sense). Th ere are also other awards and categories.Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or “ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together.Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbookB. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”，“Baby’s first year”.5. Use imagination to design the pages, and then decorate them with felt pens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon. 3.Yes; 4. At the end of the year.5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6. titles; 7.sign; 8. memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she was in college;8. had no friends;9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry. Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standing at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your mo therM: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I’m going to the library to stud y.M: For what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week.M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater?M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here. W: Are you sure? What street is this? M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening.P: You’re really busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to PacificUniversity.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a project about community safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS and drugs in our community.J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community.Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many gestures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch each other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed.People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t po int at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them.Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers; 4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great; 4. project; 5. AIDS; 6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous; 6. business card; 7. jump and nod; 8. for luck; 9. start laughing; 10. relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrate and support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products.Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t like it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” Th at means I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. I like anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually prefer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica.Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People have healthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, the Okinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birth records from 1879. They didn’t expect to find many centenarians in the records. They were very surpr ised to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The United States, for example, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34 centenarians per 100,100 people!What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they eat a healthy diet. They eat many fresh fruits and vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. But researchers think that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They don’t do hard exercise such as weightlifting or jogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activities like gardening and walking. Researchers say thatolder Okinawans also have a good attitude about aging. They sit quietly and relax their minds withdeep breathing exercised. They also enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B. 1. fast; 2.life; 3. farmers; 4. Europe;5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in the world. It it bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea; How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. gets covered with; 7. judging starts;8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale.I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable now.I: It looks old-fashionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m from Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.欧阳生创编 2021.02.08 B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pants after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t understand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!欧阳生创编 2021.02.08Optional Listening 3A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye m y hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be c omfortable! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my ha ir red. What do you think?Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer. A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?Ex pert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trendspotter. I was nervous and didn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about becoming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. Th e “Trends Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool! Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One card said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said,“No way!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popu lar right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have cards. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you like?” “Why do you like them?” “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our tour. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff!That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New YorkVicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usualElena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashionedVicki: mother, classicOL2：A. fc b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test. OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time.have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance.OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do.2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song was “OK”, and which one was “No way”.4. They just talked about the covers they liked.5. They are going to look at some new fashions.C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary2. week, Not month3. six CD covers, not one CD cover4. a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” cardOL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase; 5. gets tired; 6.stop to rest; 7. had better; 8. get some ice cream; 9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So, we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good w eekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story just in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious lights … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s startin g to seem like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa? A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and wal ked away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in. I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?” I asked. “Oh yes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five years ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during an experiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly.Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a sm all town in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. D ifferent people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. No. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came fro m Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1: A. 从左至右：4-5-1-2-3B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly;OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3(second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off2. lots of damage3. its engine exploded4. used electricity5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a3. h4. d5. g6. e7. b8. cB. 1. different people see different lights2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment; 5. showing; 6. has an alibi; 7. it isn’t tru e;8. walks in; 9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, but I didn’t have any clothes on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed. Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare.Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It r an toward me, but I couldn’t move.Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep.Conversation 3Man1: Morning Tim.Man2: Morning. Hey, I had an amazing dream last night. I was on a beautiful boat. The sun was warm and the ocean was really blue. I jumped into the water, and I began to swam with the fish. The thing is, I can’t swim. But in the dream, I could. It was pretty cool.Optional Listening 2I had an amazing dream last night. I was standing outside of an strange big house. The house was painted pink, a very rare color for a house. It had a lot of big windows, either round or rectangular. The house had large square pillars and twisted columns. I was thinking there must be a big living room, several bedrooms, a kitchen, and a guest room in such a big house. I was wondering whose house this was when I suddenly heard a voice from somewhere: “My lord, welcome home.” Wow, this was my dream house.I went inside and walked into my living room. It was spacious. There were sofas, a table, a big-screen TV, and a stereo system. It was pretty cool. All my best friends were there, too. But somehow they didn’t speak, didn’t smile, and didn’t even move. And then suddenly they all disappeared. I was scared. What a terrible dream.I then went to the kitchen. It was also spacious. There were all kinds of kitchen equipment, including a gas stove, a refrigerator, and an oven. There also many electric appliances, such as a。

新世纪视听说教程第二册听力原文及答案之欧阳文创编

新世纪大学英语 2 optional listeningUnit One, Book 2Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box?Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes. B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s persona l! I wroteabout my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it.G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My yearbook. It’s my high school book of memories. B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…Listening 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone.I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervous about traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on theairplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didn’t want to go home!Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---makingbeautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journal entries.It’s not hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,” “ Family travel,” “Memories of my grandparents,”“ Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until youfind a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, and Why. This will make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future.Listening 4Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usuallyin the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first.Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricularactivities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. Thereis even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed.In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( afunny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will be successful), and the“ best dressed” (a student with a good fashion sense). There are also other awards and categories.Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. Thisis especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other,such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or “ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together.Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbookB. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman; 4. He had lotsof fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”，“Baby’s first year”.5. Use imagination to design the pages, and then decorate them with felt pens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon. 3.Yes; 4. At the end of theyear.5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6.titles; 7. sign; 8. memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she was in college;8. had nofriends; 9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standing at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your mot herM: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I’m going to the library to study.M: For what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week.M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater?M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here.W: Are you sure? What street is this?M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening.P: You’re really busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to PacificUniversity.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a project about community safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS and drugs in our community.J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community.Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many gestures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch each other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed. People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t poi nt at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them.Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers; 4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great; 4. project; 5. AIDS; 6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous; 6. business card; 7. jump and nod;8. for luck; 9. start laughing; 10. relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrate and support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products.Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t like it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” Tha t means I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. I like anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually p refer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica.Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People have healthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, the Okinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birth records from 1879. They didn’t expect to find many centenarians in the records. They were very surpri sed to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The United States, for example, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34 centenarians per 100,100 people! What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they eat a healthy diet. T hey eat many fresh fruits and vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. But researchers think that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They don’t do hard exercise such asweightlifting or jogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activities like gardening and walking.Researchers say that older Okinawans also have a good attitude about aging. They sit quietly and relax their minds with deep breathing exercised. They also enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B. 1. fast; 2.life; 3. farmers; 4.Europe; 5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in the world. It it bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea; How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. gets covered with; 7. judging starts; 8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale.I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable now.I: It looks old-fashionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m from Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pants after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t understand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!欧阳文创编Optional Listening 3A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be co mfortable! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hai r red. What do you think?Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer. A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?Exp ert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trendspotter. I was nervous and didn’t know whatto expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about becoming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. The “Trends Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool! Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One card said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said, “No way!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popul ar right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have cards. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you like?” “Why do you like them?” “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our tour. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff!That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New YorkVicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usualElena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashionedVicki: mother, classic OL2：A. fc b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test.OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time.have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance.OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do.2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song was “OK”, and which one was “No way”.4. They just talked about the covers they liked.5. They are going to look at some new fashions. C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary2. week, Not month3. six CD covers, not one CD cover4.a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” cardOL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase; 5. gets tired; 6.stop to rest; 7. had better; 8. get some ice cream; 9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So, we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good we ekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story just in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious lights … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to seem like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa?A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walked away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in. I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?” I asked. “Oh yes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five years ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during ane xperiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly.Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a sma ll town in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. Di fferent people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. N o. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1: A. 从左至右：4-5-1-2-3B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly; OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3(second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off2. lots of damage3. its engine exploded4. used electricity5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a3. h4. d5. g6. e7. b8. cB. 1. different people see different lights2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment; 5. showing; 6. has an alibi; 7. it isn’t true; 8. walks in; 9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, but I didn’t have any clothes on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed. Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare.Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It ra n toward me, but I couldn’t move.Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep.Conversation 3Man1: Morning Tim.Man2: Morning. Hey, I had an amazing dream last night. I was on a beautiful boat. The sun was warm and the ocean was really blue. I jumped into the water, and I began to swam with the fish. The thing is, I can’t swim. But in the dream, I could. It was pretty cool.Optional Listening 2I had an amazing dream last night. I was standing outside of an strange big house. The house was painted pink, a very rare color for a house. It had a lot of big windows, either round or rectangular. The house had large square pillars and twisted columns. I was thinking there must be a big living room, several bedrooms, a kitchen, and a guest room in such a big house.I was wondering whose house this was when I suddenly heard a voice from somewhere: “My lord, welcome home.” Wow, this was my dream house.。

新世纪视听说教程第二册听力原文及答案之欧阳科创编

新世纪大学英语2 optionalUnit One, Book 2Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box?Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes.B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s persona l! I wrote about my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it.G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My yearbook. It’s my high school book of memories.B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…Listening 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervous about traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didn’t want to go home!Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journal entries. It’s not hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,” “ Family travel,” “Memories of my grandparents,”“ Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, and Why. This will make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future.Listening 4Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed.In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will besuccessful), and the “ best dressed” (a student with a good fashion sense). There are also other awards and categories. Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or “ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together.Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbookB. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”，“Baby’s first year”.5. Use imaginat ion to design the pages, and then decorate them with felt pens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon. 3.Yes; 4. At the end of the year.5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6. titles; 7. sign; 8.memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she was in college;8. had no friends;9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standing at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your mot herM: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I’m going to the library to study.M: For what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week.M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater?M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here.W: Are you sure? What street is this?M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening.P: You’re really busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to PacificUniversity.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a project about community safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS and drugs in our community.J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community.Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many gestures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch each other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed.People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t poi nt at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them.Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers; 4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great; 4. project; 5. AIDS; 6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous; 6. business card; 7. jump and nod; 8. for luck; 9. start laughing; 10. relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrate and support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products.Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t like it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” Tha t means I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. I like anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually p refer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica.Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People have healthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, the Okinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birth records from 1879. They didn’t expect to find many centenarians in the records. They were very surpri sed to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The United States, for example, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34 centenarians per 100,100 people!What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they eat a healthy diet. T hey eat many fresh fruits and vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. But researchers think that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They don’t do hard exercise such as weightlifting or jogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activities like gardening and walking. Researchers say thatolder Okinawans also have a good attitude about aging. They sit quietly and relax their minds withdeep breathing exercised. They also enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B. 1. fast; 2.life; 3. farmers; 4. Europe;5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in the world. It it bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea; How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. gets covered with; 7. judging starts;8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale.I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable now.I: It looks old-fashionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m from Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pants after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t understand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!欧阳科创编 2021.02.05Optional Listening 3A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be co mfortable! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hai r red. What do you think?Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer. A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?Exp ert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trendspotter. I was nervous and didn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about becoming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. The “Trends Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool! Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One card said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said, “No way!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popul ar right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have cards. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you like?” “Why do you like them?” “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our tour. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff!That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New YorkVicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usualElena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashionedVicki: mother, classicOL2：A. fc b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test. OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time.have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance.OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do.2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song was “OK”, and which one was “No way”.4. They just talked about the covers they liked.5. They are going to look at some new fashions.C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary2. week, Not month3. six CD covers, not one CD cover4. a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” cardOL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase; 5. gets tired; 6.stop to rest; 7. had better; 8. get some ice cream; 9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So, we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good we ekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story just in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious lights … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to seem like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa? A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walk ed away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in. I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?” I asked. “Oh yes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five years ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during an experiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly.Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a sma ll town in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. Di fferent people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. N o. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1: A. 从左至右：4-5-1-2-3B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly;OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3(second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off2. lots of damage3. its engine exploded4. used electricity5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a3. h4. d5. g6. e7. b8. cB. 1. different people see different lights2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment; 5. showing; 6. has an alibi; 7. it isn’t true;8. walks in; 9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, but I didn’t have any clothes on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed. Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare.Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It ra n toward me, but I couldn’t move.Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep.Conversation 3Man1: Morning Tim.Man2: Morning. Hey, I had an amazing dream last night. I was on a beautiful boat. The sun was warm and the ocean was really blue. I jumped into the water, and I began to swam with the fish. The thing is, I can’t swim. But in the dream, I could. It was pretty cool.Optional Listening 2I had an amazing dream last night. I was standing outside of an strange big house. The house was painted pink, a very rare color for a house. It had a lot of big windows, either round or rectangular. The house had large square pillars and twisted columns. I was thinking there must be a big living room, several bedrooms, a kitchen, and a guest room in such a big house. I was wondering whose house this was when I suddenly heard a voice from somewhere: “My lord, welcome home.” Wow, this was my dream house.I went inside and walked into my living room. It was spacious. There were sofas, a table, a big-screen TV, and a stereo system. It was pretty cool. All my best friends were there, too. But somehow they didn’t speak, didn’t smile, and didn’t even move. And then suddenly they all disappeared. I was scared. What a terrible dream.I then went to the kitchen. It was also spacious. There were all kinds of kitchen equipment, including a gas stove, a refrigerator, and an oven. There also many electric appliances, such as a。

视听说教程2听力原文unit1

视听说教程2听力原文unit1UNIT 1Long ConversationDirections: In this section, you will hear one long conversation. At the end of the conversation, you will hear four questions. Both the conversation and the questions will be spoken only once. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A), B), C) and D).Questions 4 to 7 are based on the long conversation you have just heard.4.A.She has packed it in one of her bags.B.She has probably left it in a taxi.C.She i s going to get it at the airport.D.She is afraid that she has lost it.5.A.It ends in winter.B.It will cost her a lot.C.It will last one week.D.It depends on the weather.6.A.The plane is taking off soon.B.There might be a traffic jam.C.The taxi is waiting for them.D.There is a lot of stuff to pack.7.A.At home.B.In the man’s car.C.At the airport.D. By the side of a taxi.详解4.A.She has packed it in one of her bags.B.She has probably left it in a taxi.C.She i s going to get it at the airport.D.She is afraid that she has lost it.解析：Step 1听到I can’t find my passport.马上推断出选项中的it 指 passport，且说话人之间应该是夫妻关系。

新世纪视听说教程第二册听力原文及答案之欧阳家百创编

新世纪大学英语2 optional listening欧阳家百（2021.03.07）Unit One, Book 2Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box?Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes.B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s personal! I w rote about my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it.G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My yearbook. It’s my high schoo l book of memories.B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…Listening 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervous about traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didn’t want to go home!Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings,journal entries. It’s not hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,” “ Family travel,” “Memories of my grandparents,”“ Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, and Why. This will make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future.Listening 4Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed.In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will be successful), and the “ best dressed” (a student with a good fashion sense). There are also other awards and categories.Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or “ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together.Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbookB. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home. OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”，“Baby’s first year”.5. Use imagination to design the pages, and then decorate them with felt pens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon. 3.Yes; 4. At the end of the year.5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6. titles; 7. sign; 8.memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she was in college; 8. had no friends; 9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standing at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your motherM: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now. W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you. W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris. 3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I’m going to the library to study.M: F or what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week. M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater?M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here.W: Are you sure? What street is this?M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening.P: You’re really busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to PacificUniversity.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a project about community safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS and drugs in our community.J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community.Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many g estures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch each other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed.People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t point at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them.Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers; 4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great; 4. pr oject; 5. AIDS; 6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous; 6. business card; 7. jump and nod; 8. for luck; 9. start laughing; 10. relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrate and support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products.Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t like it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” That mean s I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. I like anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually prefer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica.Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People have healthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, the Okinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birth records from 1879. They didn’t expect to find many centenarians in the records. They were very surprised to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The United States, for example, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34 centenarians per 100,100 people!What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they eat a healthy diet. They ea t many fresh fruits and vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. But researchers think that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They don’t do hard exercise such as weightlifting or jogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activities like gardening and walking. Researchers say that older Okinawans also have a good attitude about aging. They sit quietly and relax their minds with deep breathing exercised. They also enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B. 1. fast; 2.life; 3. farmers; 4. Europe;5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in the world. It it brightorange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea; Howthey exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. gets covered with; 7. judgingstarts; 8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale.I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable now.I: It looks old-fashionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m from Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pants after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t under stand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!Optional Listening 3A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comforta ble! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer. A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?Expert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trend spotter. I was nervous and didn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about becoming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. The “Tren ds Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool! Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One card said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said, “No way!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popular rig ht now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have cards. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you like?” “Why do you like them?” “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our to ur. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff!That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New YorkVicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usualElena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashionedVicki: mother, classicOL2：A. fc b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test. OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time.have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance.OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do.2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song was “OK”, and which one was “No way”.4. They just talked about the covers they liked.5. They are going to look at some new fashions.C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary2. week, Not month3. six CD covers, not one CD cover4. a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” cardOL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase; 5. gets tired; 6.stop to rest; 7. had better; 8. get some ice cream; 9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So, we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good weekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story just in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious lights … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to se em like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa?A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walked awa y quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in. I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?” I asked. “Oh yes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five years ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during an experiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly.Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a small tow n in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. Differen t people see different lights. They are not always the same.I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. No. I d on’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1: A. 从左至右：4-5-1-2-3B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly;OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3(second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off2. lots of damage3. its engine exploded4. used electricity5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a3. h4. d5. g6. e7. b8. cB. 1. different people see different lights2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment; 5. showing; 6. has an alibi; 7. it isn’t true;8. walks in; 9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, but I didn’t have any clothe s on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed. Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare.Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It ran towa rd me, but I couldn’t move.Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep.Conversation 3Man1: Morning Tim.Man2: Morning. Hey, I had an amazing dream last night. I was on a beautiful boat. The sun was warm and the ocean was really blue. I jumped into the water, and I began to swam with the fish. The thing is, I can’t swim. But in the dream, I could. It was pretty cool.Optional Listening 2I had an amazing dream last night. I was standing outside of an strange big house. The house was painted pink, a very rare color for a house. It had a lot of big windows, either round or rectangular. The house had large square pillars and twisted columns. I was thinking there must be a big living room, several bedrooms, a kitchen, and a guest room in such a big house. I was wondering whose house this was when I suddenly heard a voice from somewhere: “My lord, welcome home.” Wow, this was my dream house.I went inside and walked into my living room. It was spacious. There were sofas, a table, a big-screen TV, and a stereo system. It was pretty cool. All my best friends were there, too. But somehow they didn’t speak, didn’t smile, and didn’t even move. And then suddenly they all disappeared. I was scared. What a terrible dream.I then went to the kitchen. It was also spacious. There were all kinds of kitchen equipment, including a gas stove, a refrigerator, and an oven. There also many electric appliances, such as a microwave oven, an electric mixer, and a food processor. I liked the food processor the most,。

新世纪视听说教程第二册听力原文及答案之欧阳理创编

新世纪大学英语 2 optionalUnit One, Book 2Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box?Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes. B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s persona l! I wrote about my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it.G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My yearbook. It’s my high school book of memories. B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…Listening 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervousabout traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didn’t want to go home!Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journal entries. It’s not hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,” “ Family travel,” “Memories of my grandparents,”“ Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who,What, Where, When, and Why. This will make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future. Listening 4Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed. In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will be successful), and the “ best dressed” (a student with a good fashion sense). There are also other awards and categories.Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or “ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together.Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbookB. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”，“Baby’s first year”.5. Use imaginat ion to design the pages, and then decorate them with felt pens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon. 3.Yes; 4. At the end of the year.5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6. titles; 7.sign; 8. memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she was in college;8. had no friends;9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standing at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your mot her M: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I’m going to the library to study.M: For what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week.M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater?M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here.W: Are you sure? What street is this?M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening.P: You’re really busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to PacificUniversity.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a project about community safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS and drugs in our community. J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community.Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many gestures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch each other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed.People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t poi nt at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them. Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers; 4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great; 4. project; 5. AIDS; 6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous; 6. business card; 7. jump and nod; 8. for luck; 9. start laughing; 10. relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrate and support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products.Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t like it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” Tha t means I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. I like anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually p refer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica.Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People have healthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, the Okinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birth records from 1879. They didn’t expect to find many centenarians in the records. They were verysurprised to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The United States, for example, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34 centenariansper 100,100 people!What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they eat a healthy diet. T hey eat many fresh fruitsand vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. Butresearchers think that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They don’t do hard exercise such as weightlifting or jogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activities likegardening and walking. Researchers say that older Okinawans also have a good attitudeabout aging. They sit quietly and relax their minds with deep breathing exercised. Theyalso enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B. 1. fast; 2.life; 3. farmers;4. Europe;5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in theworld. It it bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea;How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. gets covered with; 7.judging starts; 8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale.I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable now.I: It looks old-fashionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m from Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pants after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t understand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!欧阳阳理创编 2021.03.04Optional Listening 3A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be co mfortable! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hai r red. What do you think?Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer. A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice? Exp ert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trendspotter. I was nervous and didn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about becoming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. The “Trends Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool!Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One card said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said, “No way!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popul ar right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have cards. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you like?” “Why do you like them?” “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our tour. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff! That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New YorkVicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usualElena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashionedVicki: mother, classicOL2：A. fc b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test.OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time. have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance.OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do.2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song was “OK”, and which one was “Noway”.4. They just talked about the covers they liked.5. They are going to look at some new fashions.C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary2. week, Not month3. six CD covers, not one CD cover4. a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” cardOL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase; 5. gets tired; 6.stop to rest;7. had better; 8. get some ice cream; 9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So, we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good we ekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story just in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious lights … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to seem like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa?A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walked away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in. I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?” I asked. “Oh yes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five years ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during ane xperiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly.Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a sma ll town in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. Di fferent people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. N o. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1: A. 从左至右：4-5-1-2-3B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly;OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3(second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off2. lots of damage3. its engine exploded4. used electricity5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a3. h4. d5. g6. e7. b8. cB. 1. different people see different lights2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment; 5. showing; 6. has an alibi; 7. it isn’t true; 8. walks in; 9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, but I didn’t have any clothes on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed.Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare.Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It ra n toward me, but I couldn’t move.Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep.Conversation 3Man1: Morning Tim.Man2: Morning. Hey, I had an amazing dream last night. I was on a beautiful boat. The sun was warm and the ocean was really blue. I jumped into the water, and I began to swam with the fish. The thing is, I can’t swim. But in the dream, I could. It was pretty cool.Optional Listening 2I had an amazing dream last night. I was standing outside of an strange big house. The house was painted pink, a very rare color for a house. It had a lot of big windows, either round or rectangular. The house had large square pillars and twisted columns. I was thinking there must be a big living room, several bedrooms, a kitchen, and a guest room in such a big house. I was wondering whose house this was when I suddenly heard a voice from somewhere: “My lord, welcome home.” Wow, this was my dream house.I went inside and walked into my living room. It was spacious. There were sofas, a table, a big-screen TV, and a stereo system. It was pretty cool. All my best friends were there, too. But somehow they didn’t speak, didn’t smile, and didn’t even move. And then suddenly they all disappeared. I was scared. What a terrible dream.I then went to the kitchen. It was also spacious. There were all kinds of kitchen equipment, including a gas stove, a refrigerator, and an oven. There also many electric appliances, such as a microwave oven, an electric mixer, and a food processor. I liked the food processor the most, which made life much easier. There was also a dining table in the middle of the room. The whole family was sitting around the table, waiting for the meal to be served. But the fridge was empty, and the gas stove didn’t work. And there was no electricity at all for the microwave oven and the the food processor. The hungry kids started to cry. I was in despair. And then suddenly I woke up.Optional Listening 3Sleep and dreamsScientists know that the brain is very active when a person is sleeping. There are five stages, or parts, of sleep. Stage 1 starts after you fall asleep. If there is a noise or a bright light, you wake up very easily. In stage 2, your brain waves are very slow. In stage 3 and 4, you are in deep sleep. It’s very difficult to wake up then. Your body rests and grows during these stages. Stage 5 is when you dream. Your eyes move a lot, and your brain waves are fast. This stage of sleep is very important for your memory. After stage 5, you wake up a little, and then stage 1 starts again. We go through the five stages of sleep four or five times every night, so we have many dreams in one night. How much sleep do you need? The answer depends on your age. Babies should sleep 15 to 16 hours every day. Children and teenagers need 9 or 10 hpurs of sleep, but older people only need 6 to 8 hours. If you sleep for only four hours one night, you may just feel tired the next day. But many nights of bad sleep can be bad for your health. People who don’t get enough sleep get sick more often. And sle ep is very important for learning. It’s one reason why students should go to bed early.Optional Listening 4The meaning of dreamsFor centuries, people have asked: why do we dream? What do our dreams mean? Today, science doesn’t have definite answers to t hese questions, but we do know some things about dreams. First, we all dream, often 4 to 5 times a night. Second, we don’t usually remember most of our dreams. And finally, when we dream, our brains are very active.Thousands of years ago, people began to study dreams. In many cultures, people believed dreams were messages from spirits or gods. Later, the ancient Greeks and。

(2020年7月整理)新世纪视听说教程第二册听力原文及答案.doc

新世纪大学英语2 optional listeningUnit One, Book 2Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box?Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes.B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s personal! I wrote about my firs t boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it.G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My yearbook. It’s my high school book of memories.B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…Listening 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervo us about traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didn’t want to go home!Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journal entries. It’s not hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,” “ Family travel,” “Memories of my grandparents,”“ Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, and Why. This will make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future.Listening 4Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students. Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed.In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will be successful), and the “ best dressed” (a student with a good fashion sense). There are also other awar ds and categories. Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or “ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together. Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbook B. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters. 3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why. 4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”，“Baby’s first year”. 5. Use imagination to design the pages, and then decorate them with felt pens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon. 3.Yes; 4. At the end of the year. 5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6. titles; 7. sign; 8. memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she was in college;8. had no friends;9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standi ng at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your motherM: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I’m going to the library to study.M: For what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week.M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater? M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here. W: Are you sure? What street is this? M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening.P: You’re real ly busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam i s going to Pacific University.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a project about community safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS a nd drugs in our community.J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community.Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many gestures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch each other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed.People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to h im with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t point at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them.Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers; 4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great; 4. project; 5. AIDS; 6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous; 6. business card; 7. jump and nod; 8. for luck; 9. start laughing; 10. relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrate and support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products.Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I sho uld eat less butter. It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t lik e it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” That means I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. I like anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually prefer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica.Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People have healthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, the Okinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birth records from 1879. They didn’t exp ect to find many centenarians in the records. They were very surprised to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The United States, for example, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34 centenarians per 100,100 people!What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they eat a healthy diet. They eat many fresh fruits and vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. But researchers think that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They d on’t do hard exercise such as weightlifting orjogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activities like gardening and walking. Researchers say thatolder Okinawans also have a good attitude about aging. They sit quietly and relax their minds with deep breathing exercised. They also enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B. 1. fast; 2.life; 3. farmers; 4. Europe;5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in the world. It it bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea; How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. gets covered with; 7. judging starts;8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale.I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable now.I: It looks old-fash ionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m fr om Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pa nts after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t understand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!Optional Listening 3A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no j ewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer. A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?Expert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trendspotter. I was nervous and didn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about becoming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. The “Trends Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool!Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One card said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said, “No way!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popular right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have cards. Instead, we just talked abo ut the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you like?” “Why do you like them?” “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our tour. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff!That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New York Vicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usual Elena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashioned Vicki: mother, classic OL2：A. f c b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test. OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time.have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance.OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do. 2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to dec ide which song was “OK”, and which one was “No way”. 4. They just talked about the covers they liked. 5. They are going to look at some new fashions.C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary 2. week, Not month 3. six CD covers, not one CD cover 4. a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” cardOL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase; 5. gets tired; 6.stop to rest; 7. had better; 8. get some ice cream; 9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So,we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good weekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story just in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious ligh ts … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to seem like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa? A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walked away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in. I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?” I asked. “Oh yes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five yea rs ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during an experiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly.Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a small town in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. Different people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. No. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September th ere is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1: A. 从左至右：4-5-1-2-3 B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly;OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3 (second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off 2. lots of damage 3. its engine exploded 4. used electricity 5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a 3. h 4. d 5. g 6. e 7. b 8. cB. 1. different people see different lights 2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment; 5. showing; 6. has an alibi; 7. it isn’t true;8. walks in; 9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, b ut I didn’t have any clothes on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed. Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare.Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It ran toward me, but I couldn’t move.Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep.Conversation 3Man1: Morning Tim.Man2: Morning. Hey, I had an amazing dream last night. I was on a beautiful boat. The sun was warm and the ocean was really blue. I jumped into the water, and I began to swam with the fish. The thing is, I can’t swim. But in the dream, I could. It was pretty cool.Optional Listening 2I had an amazing dream last night. I was standing outside of an strange big house. The house was painted pink, a very rare color for a house. It had a lot of big windows, either round or rectangular. The house had large square pillars and twisted columns. I was thinking there must be a big living room, several bedrooms, a kitchen, and a guest room in such a big house. I was wondering whose house this was when I suddenly heard a voice from somewhere: “My lord, welcome home.” Wow, this was my dream house.I went inside and walked into my living room. It was spacious. There were sofas, a table, abig-screen TV, and a stereo system. It was pretty cool. All my best friends were there, too. But somehow they didn’t speak, didn’t smile, and didn’t even move. And then suddenly they all disappeared. I was scared. What a terrible dream.I then went to the kitchen. It was also spacious. There were all kinds of kitchen equipment, including a gas stove, a refrigerator, and an oven. There also many electric appliances, such as a。

新世纪大学英语视听说教程2第二版答案unit1 Living in Harmony

Key to Unit One Living in HarmonyP21Checking your vocabulary1-5 c d a i h 6-10 b e i g fP221-8 SSSASSSAP23-241.T2.F3.F4.F5.T6.T7.F8.FEnhance Your Language AwarenessWords in Action▆Working with Words and Expressions1.In the boxes below are some of the words you have learned in this unit. Complete the followingsentences with them. Change the form where necessary.▆ Answers:1)bunch2)amazed3)shift4)bundle5)drop6)capacity7)participating8)style9)commerce10)rob11)symbol12)appreciated13)displayed14)slip15)conquer16)roast17)figured2.In the box below are some of the expressions you have learned in this unit. Do you understand theirmeanings? Do you know how to use them in the proper context? Now check for yourself by doing the blank-filling exercise. Change the form where necessary.▆ Answers:1)in rich contrast to2)are exposed to3)risked his life4)rely on5)at knife-point6)stands out7)runs contrary to8)flag down9)picks/picked up10)took a gamble on11)pulled away12)pulled over▆Increasing Your Word Power1. CollocationsLook at the adverbs listed in the box below, and decide which adverb is needed to collocate with the verb in each sentence. Fill the correct adverb into the blank in the sentence. The same word may be used in more than one sentence. Consult a dictionary if necessary.▆ Answers:1) out2) over3) back4) down5) over6) up7) out8) back9) down10) out11) up12) over13) back14) out15) down16) over2.Study the different meanings of the word “than” in the following sentences.▆ Answers for Reference:1)Action speaks louder than words.2)Production here needs temperatures lower than 25 degrees Celsius.3)I like to keep things rather than throw them away.4)There is nobody here other than me.5)She’d rather leave her job than (be forced to) work for that boss.3. Word BuildingNow choose the Chinese meaning from Column B that matches each italicized word in Column A. You may consult a dictionary if necessary.▆ Answers:1) d.2) k3) n4) j5) a6) g7) f8) b9) o10) m11) p12) e13) c14) h15) i16) lGrammar in Context1.The –ing form and the infinitive form of the verbTask: Choose either the infinitive form or the –ing form of the verb in the brackets to complete each of the following sentences.▆ Answers:1) preparing2) to thank3) repairing / to be repaired4) to get5) studying6) being treated7) missing8) to reduce9) to leave10) worrying2. The –ed form and the –ing form of the verbStudy the following sentences that appear in this unit, paying special attention to the –ed form and –ing form of the verb. Reflect on its grammatical function in each sentence.Task：Complete the following sentences by translating the Chinese in the brackets into English, paying attention to the use of the -ing form and the -ed form of verbs.▆ Answers:1) kept nodding, rather confused2) Fallen leaves3) surprised, hiding4) Deeply moved5) following6) Being, interested7) located8) readingCloze▆Complete the following passage with words chosen from Text A. The initial letter of each is given.▆ Answers:1) relying2) intrigued3) penny4) for5) covered6) treated7) amazed8) contrary9) generally10) whatever11) invited12) attentive13) whereTranslation▆ Translate the following sentences into English, using the words given in brackets.▆ Answers for Reference:1)The rumor about his divorce is just a ploy to gain publicity for his new film.2)He took a gamble on starting a factory with all the money his parents had left him.3)After winning the important game they hoisted their captain to their shoulders in shouting triumph.4)In the rush to go for globalization, we should watch out for collision of cultures.5)In the circumstances it was not surprising that there was trouble.6)The baby is the very picture of health.7)People have realized the dangers of exposing children to violence and sex on TV.8)We always had in mind for whom we were making the film.Theme-Related Writing▆ Choose one of the following writing tasks and complete it after class.1) Write an essay (of about 250 words) about a memorable experience in which you helped a stranger or were helped by him or her.▆Sample Essay for Task 1:One weekend morning, while walking on a bustling street with a light heart, I was suddenly overtaken by a startling moan. Turning around, I discovered the sound was coming from a black mass in a corner. “What’s that?” My heart pounded heavily. I went up and saw a human being, alive but in a dreadful state. He was crouching on the ground with deformed hands and legs, mumbling something. He had obviously lost the normal ability to move and work. A dirty plate was placed in front the miserable-looking man, in which there were some coins and small notes.As my eyes were drifting away from him, his eyes caught mine suddenly. What eyes they were! Filled with misery and expectation, they were looking straight at me. He was unable to speak, but I seemed to hear his pleading voice and read his despairing mind. His look seemed to be telling me about his hard life and his longing for help. For a while, I was at a loss what to do. Should I drop some coins in the plate like some other passers-by or turn away in indifference? I recalled news reports about men pretending to be beggars, who were actually healthy and able to work. Could this be another one of those scams? But the beggar was there, groaning and living. Then something seemed to hit me hard. I drew a five-yuan note from my pocket, dropped it in his dirty plate and walked away quickly in silence.“No good deed is too small.” Maybe we need to bear this saying in mind.。

新世纪视听说教程第二册听力原文及答案之欧阳学创编

新世纪大学英语 2 optionalUnit One, Book 2Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box?Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes.B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s persona l! I wrote about my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it. G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My yearbook. It’s my high school book of memories.B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…Listening 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I wentto visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervous about traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a longtime to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home.I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didn’t want to go home! Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journal entries. It’s not hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,” “ Family travel,” “Memories of my grandparents,”“ Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, and Why. This will make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future. Listening 4Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed. In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will be successful), and the “ best dressed” (a student with a good fashion sense). There are also other awards and categories. Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or “ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together.Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbookB. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”，“Baby’s first year”.5. Use imaginat ion to design the pages, and then decorate them with felt pens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon. 3.Yes; 4. At the end of the year.5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6. titles; 7. sign;8. memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she was in college;8. had no friends;9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standing at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your mot herM: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I’m going to the library to study. M: For what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week. M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater? M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here. W: Are you sure? What street is this? M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening.P: You’re really busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to PacificUniversity.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a project about community safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS and drugs in our community. J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community.Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many gestures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch each other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed.People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t poi nt at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them.Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers; 4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great; 4. project; 5. AIDS; 6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous; 6. business card; 7. jump and nod; 8. for luck; 9. start laughing; 10. relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrate and support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products.Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t like it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” Tha t means I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. I like anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually p refer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica.Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People have healthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, the Okinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birth records from 1879. They didn’t expect to find many centenarians in the records. They were verysurprised to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The United States, forexample, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34 centenarians per 100,100 people!What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they eat a healthy diet. T hey eat many fresh fruits and vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. But researchersthink that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They don’t do hard exercise such as weightlifting or jogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activities like gardening andwalking. Researchers say that older Okinawans also have a good attitude about aging. They sit quietly and relax their minds with deep breathing exercised. They also enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B. 1. fast; 2.life; 3. farmers; 4.Europe; 5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in the world. It it bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea;How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. gets covered with; 7.judging starts; 8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale. I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable now.I: It looks old-fashionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m from Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pants after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t understand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!欧阳学创编Optional Listening 3A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be co mfortable! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hai r red. What do you think?Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer. A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?Exp ert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trendspotter. I was nervous and didn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about becoming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. The “Trends Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool!Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One card said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said, “No way!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popul ar right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have cards. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you like?” “Why do you like them?” “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our tour. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff!That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New YorkVicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usualElena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashionedVicki: mother, classicOL2：A. fc b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test.OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time. have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance.OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do.2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song was “OK”, and which one was “No way”.4. They just talked about the covers they liked.5. They are going to look at some new fashions.C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary2. week, Not month3. six CD covers, not one CD cover4. a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” cardOL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase; 5. gets tired; 6.stop to rest; 7. had better; 8. get some ice cream; 9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So, we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good we ekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story just in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious lights … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to seem like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa?A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walked away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in. I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?” I asked. “Oh yes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five years ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during ane xperiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly.Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a sma ll town in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. Di fferent people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. N o. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1: A. 从左至右：4-5-1-2-3B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly; OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3(second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off2. lots of damage3. its engine exploded4. used electricity5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a3. h4. d5. g6. e7. b8. cB. 1. different people see different lights2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment; 5. showing; 6. has an alibi; 7. it isn’t true; 8. walks in; 9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, but I didn’t have any clothes on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed.Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare.Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It ra n toward me, but I couldn’t move.Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep.Conversation 3Man1: Morning Tim.Man2: Morning. Hey, I had an amazing dream last night. I was on a beautiful boat. The sun was warm and the ocean was really blue. I jumped into the water, and I began to。

新视野大学英语视听说教程2 听力答案unit1 unit text

Part I ScriptDirections: Listen to the short dialogs, and then choose the correct answers to the questions. You will hear the recording twice. After the first playing, there will be time for you to choose the correct answers. Use the second playing to check your answers.1.(Listen to the audio recording for the question.)A. Heavy metal.B. Rock.C. Golden oldies.D. Pop music.2.(Listen to the audio recording for the question.)A. She is from Hong Kong.B. She is familiar with the Hong Kong singers.C. She is not familiar with the music they are listening to.D. She enjoys the music they are listening to.3.(Listen to the audio recording for the question.)A. The man won't turn on the stereo for the woman.B. The woman loves fast music.C. Slow music can give people energy according to the man.D. Fast music can give people energy according to the man.4.(Listen to the audio recording for the question.)A. The man thinks the tickets are inexpensive while the woman thinks they are expensive.B. The man thinks the tickets are expensive while the woman thinks they are inexpensive.C. They both think the tickets are expensive.D. They both think the tickets are inexpensive.5.(Listen to the audio recording for the question.)A. The man probably moved in not long ago.B. The woman probably moved in not long ago.C. The man is interested in the bass.D. The woman wants to finish the party as early as possible.Part II ScriptDirections: Listen to the following recording, and then fill in the blanks with the missing words. You will hear the recording twice. After the first playing, there will be time to write the missing words. Use the second playing to check your answers.W:Oh, Backstreet Boys! They were my (1) ________ last year.M:(2)_______W:Yes, though my interest is (3)______ so strong. You see, I was once(4)_________ of them.M:I know you (5)______ posters and bought every CD they ever made.W:I also went to almost every concert they had—even (6)_______ in Canada! M:Don't you think that was strange? (7)________ over some strangers?W:(8)_______. But students have too much (9)_________. We have to spenda lot of time studying...M:Which leads you to (10)________ with pop stars? I don't (11)_______. W:You see, under great pressure, we need relaxation (12)______. And...M:(13)_______!W:In a sec! Let's watch this (14)_______ first!Correct answerfavorite bandNot anymoreno longera big fancollectedthe onesGoing crazyMaybe to youpressurefall in loveget itfrom time to timeGo onmusic videoPart III ScriptDirections: Listen to the following recording, and then choose the correct answers to the questions. You will hear the recording twice. After the first playing, there will be time for you to choose the correct answers. Use the second playing to check your answers.1.What has Williams recently said?A. Music piracy is costing the music industry a lot of money.B. Music piracy is a good thing.C. Music piracy promotes the popularity of his songs.D. Music piracy should be banned.2. Why is Williams so rich now?A. He has recently inherited a lot of money.B. He has benefited a great deal from music piracy.C. He has got lots of money from the record companies.D. He has received large donations from his fans.3. When Williams asked the record companies about the issue of music piracy,what responses did he get from them?A. They were angry but would not do anything about it.B. They found themselves helpless.C. They did not care since they could get lots of money from over-pricedCDs.D. They were angry and were trying to settle the issue in court.4. What examples of music piracy are mentioned in the passage?A. Online song-sharing.B. CD copying.C. Downloading songs from the Internet.D. Both A) and B).5. What is the speaker's tone about music piracy?A. Neutral.B. Negative.C. Positive.D. Sarcastic.Part IVDirections: Choose the best answer to each of the following statements.1. When the audience cried "Encore", the singer was overjoyed with the_________ from the audience.A. answerB. replyC. responseD. return2.In 1781, he left for Vienna, where he was in great ________ as both aperformer and a composition teacher.A. necessityB. needC. wantD. demand3.Although Mozart lived only a short life, he _______ over 600 works.A. composedB. composed ofC. composed inD. was composed of4.In 1916, Patty took legal action ________ Mr. Coleman.A. overB. againstC. withD. for5.His music from the next decade was not very popular, and he eventuallyfell back on his teaching jobs ______ a living.A. forB. toC. onD. with6.From that time _____, Mozart was performing in concerts and writing music.A. aheadB. forthC. onD. down7.We sometimes danced _____ the music in a karaoke bar.A. atB. forC. withD. to8.Let's go for ______ before we go to _________.A. lunch ... concertB. the lunch ... the concertC. lunch ... the concertD. the lunch ... concert9.Before the age of four, Mozart ______ great musical talent.A. has shownB. had shownC. had been shownD. have showed10.After Patty Hill became the head of the Department of KindergartenEducation, a gentleman ________ Robert Coleman published the song.A. called the name ofB. at the nameC. by the name ofD. in the name of。

大学英语新世纪视听说第二册听力原文和答案

新世纪大学英语视听说教程2的optional listening 原文及答案免费下载Unit One, Book 22-1-3------- 2-1-4 ------ Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box?Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes.B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s personal! I wrote about my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it.G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My year book. It’s my high school book of memories.B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervous about traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didn’t want to go home!Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journal entries. It’s not hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook page s. Some examples: “School days,” “ Family travel,” “Memories of my grandparents,”“ Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, and Why. This will make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future.Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed.In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will be successful), and the “ best dressed” (a student with a good fashion sense). There are also other awards and categories.Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or“ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together.Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbook B. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”，“Baby’s first year”.5. Use imagination to design the pages, and then decorate them with felt pens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon.3.Yes;4. At the end of the year.5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6. titles; 7. sign; 8.memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she was in college;8. had no friends;9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standi ng at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your mother M: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I’m going to the library to study.M: For what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week.M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater? M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here. W: Are you sure? What street is this? M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening.P: You’re real ly busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to Pacific University.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a project about community safety. J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS a nd drugs in our community.J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community. Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putti ng their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many gestures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch each other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed.People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to h im with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t point at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them. Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers; 4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great; 4. project; 5. AIDS; 6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous; 6. business card; 7. jump and nod; 8. for luck; 9. start laughing; 10. relax and have fun Unit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrate and support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products. Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t lik e it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” That means I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. I like anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually prefer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica. Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People have healthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, theOkinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birth records from 1879. They didn’t exp ect to find many centenarians in the records. They were very surprised to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The United States, for example, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34 centenarians per 100,100 people!What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they eat a healthy diet. They eat many fresh fruits and vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. But researchers think that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They d on’t do hard exercise such as weightlifting orjogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activities like gardening and walking.Researchers say that older Okinawans also have a good attitude about aging.They sit quietly and relax their minds with deep breathing exercised. They also enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B. 1. fast;2.life;3. farmers;4. Europe;5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that producesheat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in the world. It it bright orange and grows in theCaribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea; How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax:deep breathing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. getscovered with; 7. judging starts; 8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted;10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale.I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable now.I: It looks old-fash ionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m fr om Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do? B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pa nts after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t understand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!Optional Listening 3A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no j ewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer. A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?Expert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trendspotter. I was nervous and didn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about becoming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. The “Trends Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool!Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One ca rd said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said, “No way!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popular right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have cards. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you like?” “Why do you like them?” “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our tour. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff!That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New York Vicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usual Elena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashioned Vicki: mother, classicOL2：A. f c b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test.OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time.have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance.OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do. 2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song was “OK”, and which one was “No way”. 4. They just talked about the covers they liked. 5. They are going to look at some new fashions. C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary 2. week, Not month 3. six CD covers, not one CD cover 4. a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” card OL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase; 5. gets tired;6.stop to rest;7. had better;8. get some ice cream;9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So,we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good weekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story just in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lightswere bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysteriousligh ts … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to seem like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa?A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walked away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in.I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?” I asked. “Ohyes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five yea rs ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during an experiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly.Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a small town in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that. Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. Different people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear. Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. No. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights. KeysOL1: A. 从左至右：4-5-1-2-3 B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly;OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3 (second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off 2. lots of damage 3. its engine exploded4. used electricity5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a 3. h 4. d 5. g 6. e 7. b 8. cB. 1. different people see different lights 2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery. OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment;5. showing;6. has an al ibi;7. it isn’t true;8. walks in;9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, b ut I didn’t have any clothes on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed.Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare.Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It ran toward me, but I couldn’t move.Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep. Conversation 3Man1: Morning Tim.Man2: Morning. Hey, I had an amazing dream last night. I was on a beautiful boat. The sun was warm and the ocean was really blue. I jumped into the water, and I began to swam with the fish. The thing is, I can’t swim. But in the dream, I could. It was pretty cool.Optional Listening 2I had an amazing dream last night. I was standing outside of an strange big house. The house was painted pink, a very rare color for a house. It had a lot of big windows, either round or rectangular. The house had large square pillars and twisted columns. I was thinking there must be a big living room, several bedrooms, a kitchen, and a guest room in such a big house. I was wondering whose house this was when I suddenly heard a voice from somewhere: “My lord, welcome home.” Wow, this was my dream house.。

新视野大学英语视听说教程2听力答案unit1unittext

Part I ScriptDirections: Listen to the short dialogs, and then choose the correct answers to the questions. You will hear the recording twice. After the first playing, there will be time for you to choose the correct answers. Use the second playing to check your answers.1.(Listen to the audio recording for the question.)A. Heavy metal.B. Rock.C. Golden oldies.D. Pop music.2.(Listen to the audio recording for the question.)A. She is from Hong Kong.B. She is familiar with the Hong Kong singers.C. She is not familiar with the music they are listening to.D. She enjoys the music they are listening to.3.(Listen to the audio recording for the question.)A. The man won't turn on the stereo for the woman.B. The woman loves fast music.C. Slow music can give people energy according to the man.D. Fast music can give people energy according to the man.4.(Listen to the audio recording for the question.)A. The man thinks the tickets are inexpensive while the woman thinksthey are expensive.B. The man thinks the tickets are expensive while the woman thinks theyare inexpensive.C. They both think the tickets are expensive.D. They both think the tickets are inexpensive.5.(Listen to the audio recording for the question.)A. The man probably moved in not long ago.B. The woman probably moved in not long ago.C. The man is interested in the bass.D. The woman wants to finish the party as early as possible.Part II ScriptDirections: Listen to the following recording, and then fill in the blanks with the missing words. You will hear the recording twice. After the first playing, there will be time to write the missing words. Use the second playing to check your answers.W:Oh, Backstreet Boys! They were my (1) ________ last year.M:(2)_______W:Yes, though my interest is (3)______ so strong. You see, I was once(4)_________ of them.M:I know you (5)______ posters and bought every CD they ever made.W:I also went to almost every concert they had—even (6)_______ in Canada! M:Don't you think that was strange? (7)________ over some strangers?W:(8)_______. But students have too much (9)_________. We have to spenda lot of time studying...M:Which leads you to (10)________ with pop stars? I don't (11)_______. W:You see, under great pressure, we need relaxation (12)______. And...M:(13)_______!W:In a sec! Let's watch this (14)_______ first!Part III ScriptDirections: Listen to the following recording, and then choose the correct answers to the questions. You will hear the recording twice. After the first playing, there will be time for you to choose the correct answers. Use the second playing to check your answers.1.What has Williams recently said?A. Music piracy is costing the music industry a lot of money.B. Music piracy is a good thing.C. Music piracy promotes the popularity of his songs.D. Music piracy should be banned.2.Why is Williams so rich now?A. He has recently inherited a lot of money.B. He has benefited a great deal from music piracy.C. He has got lots of money from the record companies.D. He has received large donations from his fans.3.When Williams asked the record companies about the issue of music piracy,what responses did he get from them?A. They were angry but would not do anything about it.B. They found themselves helpless.C. They did not care since they could get lots of money from over-pricedCDs.D. They were angry and were trying to settle the issue in court.4.What examples of music piracy are mentioned in the passage?A. Online song-sharing.B. CD copying.C. Downloading songs from the Internet.D. Both A) and B).5.What is the speaker's tone about music piracy?A. Neutral.B. Negative.C. Positive.D. Sarcastic.Part IVDirections: Choose the best answer to each of the following statements.1.When the audience cried "Encore", the singer was overjoyed with the_________ from the audience.A. answerB. replyC. responseD. return2.In 1781, he left for Vienna, where he was in great ________ as both aperformer and a composition teacher.A. necessityB. needC. wantD. demand3.Although Mozart lived only a short life, he _______ over 600 works.A. composedB. composed ofC. composed inD. was composed of4.In 1916, Patty took legal action ________ Mr. Coleman.A. overB. againstC. withD. for5.His music from the next decade was not very popular, and he eventually fellback on his teaching jobs ______ a living.A. forB. toC. onD. with6.From that time _____, Mozart was performing in concerts and writing music.A. aheadB. forthC. onD. down7.We sometimes danced _____ the music in a karaoke bar.A. atB. forC. withD. to8.Let's go for ______ before we go to _________.A. lunch ... concertB. the lunch ... the concertC. lunch ... the concertD. the lunch ... concert9.Before the age of four, Mozart ______ great musical talent.A. has shownB. had shownC. had been shownD. have showed10.After Patty Hill became the head of the Department of KindergartenEducation, a gentleman ________ Robert Coleman published the song.A. called the name ofB. at the nameC. by the name ofD. in the name of以下是附加文档，不需要的朋友下载后删除，谢谢顶岗实习总结专题13篇第一篇:顶岗实习总结为了进一步巩固理论知识，将理论与实践有机地结合起来，按照学校的计划要求，本人进行了为期个月的顶岗实习。

新世纪大学英语视听说2Unit1标准答案

新世纪大学英语视听说教程2的optional listening 原文及答案免费下载Unit One, Book 2Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box? Grandma: Oh, nothing really…Just a few old keepsakes. B: Keepsakes? G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is ! B: No, I don’t. I really don’t. G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories. B: Oh. What’s this? G: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary. B: Can I….? G: No, you can’t read it! It’s personal! I wrote about my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather! B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it. G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship. B: What’s that big book? G: My yearbook. It’s my high school b ook of memories. B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old! G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…Listening 2 At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervous about traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was myfirst time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didn’t want to go home!Listening 3Making memories A popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journal entries. It’s not hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps.. 1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,” “ Family travel,” “Memories of my grandparents,” “ Baby’s first year.” 2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos. 3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination! 4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, and Why. This will make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future. Listening 4Yearbooks in the United States Most high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book ofmemories” for the students. Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too. The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed. In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will be successful), and the “ best dressed” (a student with a good fashion sense). There are also other awards and categories. Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or “ I’ll never forget you.”They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together. Keys:第二页1,5,6,3,2,4OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbook第三页2,2,1,22第四页2,1,3.第五页B：1.memories 2.. boyfriend 3. it’s personal 4. Europe, ship 5. sixtiesA. 1. 13. 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home.第五页B下面：1. very nervous about traveling so far 2. his grandparents 3. their home 4. two第六页：A 1. theme 3. other paper keepsakes 5. your photos and keepsakesB. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters. 3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.第7页A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon. 3.Yes; 4. At the end of the year. 5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.第8页：B1. once a year, spring 2. chess 3. most likely to succeed , categories 4. notes, I will never forget you.第8页C 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6. titles; 7. sign; 8. memories第10页1. how about you 2. this is 3. Hi 4. Let me introduce my self 5.I’d like you to meet 6. Nice to meet you第13页1. father2. sister3. mother4. grandfather5. grandmother6. brother1. T2. T3. F4. F第14页B 1. sisters brother 2. Ester 80 3. special, supportive 4. go out, most things, importantC 1. her grandfather, he is always kind to her and supportive2. he likes to go out with them and he can talk to them about most things第14页下面1. wise2. collect3. amusement park第15页1. memories2. collected3. favorite4. one of my happiest memories5. my first day of school6. I wanted the most第16页caacb第17页A bdfeahgc B badce第18页C1,blind date 2. friend and colleaque , Brazil , US office3. excited and a little nervous4. jewelryD1. isn’t beautiful 2. too bad 3. hanging on to 4keeping it for the memories第19页E 1. my favorite keepsake 2. pendant 3. things were rough 4. hated 5. make it 6. told 7. helped out 8. as a reminder 9. you know 10. here goes。

新世纪视听说教程第二册听力原文及答案之欧阳地创编

新世纪大学英语 2 optional listeningUnit One, Book 2Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box?Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes.B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around inthere! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s persona l! I wrote about my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it.G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My yearbook. It’s my high school book of memories.B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…Listening 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervous about traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didn’t want to go home!Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journal entries. It’s not hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,” “ Family travel,” “Memories of mygrandparents,”“ Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, and Why. This will make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future.Listening 4Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The lastphotos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed.In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will be successful), and the “ best dressed” (astudent with a good fashion sense). There arealso other awards and categories.Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students writenotes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or “ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiencesthey shared in school together.Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbookB. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman;4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents andhe saw lots of interesting places. In the end,he even didn’t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautifulbooks to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”，“Baby’s first year”.5. Use imaginat ion to design the pages, and then decorate them withfelt pens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon. 3.Yes; 4. At the endof the year.5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook;6. titles;7. sign;8. memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she was in college;8. had no friends;9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standing at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your mot her M: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I’m going to the library to study.M: For what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week.M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater?M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here.W: Are you sure? What street is this?M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening.P: You’re really busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to PacificUniversity.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a project about community safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS and drugs in our community. J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community.Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many gestures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch each other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed.People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t poi nt at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them. Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers; 4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great; 4. project; 5. AIDS; 6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous; 6. business card; 7. jump and nod; 8. for luck; 9. start laughing; 10. relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrate and support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products.Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t like it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” Tha t means I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. I like anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually p refer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica.Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People have healthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, the Okinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birth recordsfrom 1879. They didn’t expect to find many centenarians in the records. They were verysurprised to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The United States, for example, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34 centenarians per 100,100 people!What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they eat a healthy diet. T hey eat many fresh fruits and vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. But researchersthink that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They don’t do hard exercise such as weightlifting or jogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activities like gardening andwalking. Researchers say that older Okinawans also have a good attitude about aging. They sit quietly and relax their minds with deep breathing exercised. They also enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B. 1. fast; 2.life; 3. farmers; 4.Europe; 5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makesyour mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in theworld. It it bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea;How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. gets covered with; 7.judging starts; 8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale. I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable now.I: It looks old-fashionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m from Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pants after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t understand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!Optional Listening 3A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be co mfortable! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hai r red. What do you think?Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer. A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice? Exp ert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trendspotter. I was nervous and didn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about becoming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. The “Trends Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool!Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One card said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said, “No way!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popul ar right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have cards. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you like?” “Why do you like them?” “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our tour. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff!That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New YorkVicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usualElena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashionedVicki: mother, classicOL2：A. fc b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test.OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time. have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance.OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do.2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song was “OK”, and which one was “No way”.4. They just talked about the covers they liked.5. They are going to look at some new fashions.C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary2. week, Not month3. six CD covers, not one CD cover4. a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” cardOL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase; 5. gets tired; 6.stop to rest;7. had better; 8. get some ice cream; 9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So, we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good we ekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story just in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious lights … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to seem like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa?A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walked away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in.I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?” I asked. “Oh yes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five years ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during ane xperiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly.Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a sma ll town in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. Di fferent people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. N o. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1: A. 从左至右：4-5-1-2-3B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly;OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3(second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off2. lots of damage3. its engine exploded4. used electricity5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a3. h4. d5. g6. e7. b8. cB. 1. different people see different lights2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment; 5. showing; 6. has an alibi; 7. it isn’t true; 8. walks in; 9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, but I didn’t have any clothes on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed.Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare.Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It ra n toward me, but I couldn’t move.Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep.Conversation 3Man1: Morning Tim.Man2: Morning. Hey, I had an amazing dream last night. I was on a beautiful boat. The sun was warm and the ocean was really blue. I jumped into the water, and I began to swam with the fish. The thing is, I can’t swim. But in the dream, I could. It was pretty cool.Optional Listening 2I had an amazing dream last night. I was standing outside of an strange big house. The house was painted pink, a very rare color for a house. It had a lot of big windows, either round or rectangular. The house had large square pillars and twisted columns. I was thinking there must be a big living room, several bedrooms, a kitchen, and a guest room in such a big house. I was wondering whose house this was when I suddenly heard a voice from somewhere: “My lord, welcome home.” Wow, this was my dream house.I went inside and walked into my living room. It was spacious. There were sofas, a table,a big-screen TV, and a stereo system. It was pretty cool. All my best friends were there, too. But somehow they didn’t speak, didn’t smile, and didn’t even move. And then suddenly they all disappeared. I was scared. What a terrible dream.I then went to the kitchen. It was also spacious. There were all kinds of kitchen equipment, including a gas stove, a refrigerator, and an oven. There also many electric appliances, such as a microwave oven, an electric mixer, and a food processor. I liked the food processor the most, which made life much easier. There was also a dining table in the middle of the room. The whole family was sitting around the table, waiting for the meal to be served. But the fridge was empty, and the gas stove didn’t work. And there was no electricity at all for the microwave oven and the the food processor. The hungry kids started to cry. I was in despair. And then suddenly I woke up.Optional Listening 3Sleep and dreamsScientists know that the brain is very active when a person is sleeping. There are five stages, or parts, of sleep. Stage 1 starts after you fall asleep. If there is a noise or a bright light, you wake up very easily. In stage 2, your brain waves are very slow. In stage 3 and 4, you are in deep sleep. It’s very difficult to wake up then. Your body rests and grows during these stages. Stage 5 is when you dream. Your eyes move a lot, and your brain waves are fast. This stage of sleep is very important for your memory. After stage 5, you wake up a little, and then stage 1 starts again. We go through the five stages of sleep four or five times every night, so we have many dreams in one night.How much sleep do you need? The answer depends on your age. Babies should sleep 15 to 16 hours every day. Children and teenagers need 9 or 10 hpurs of sleep, but older people only need 6 to 8 hours. If you sleep for only four hours one night, you may just feel tired the next day. But many nights of bad sleep can be bad for your health. People who don’t get enough sleep get sick more often. And sle ep is very important for learning. It’s one reason why students should go to bed early.Optional Listening 4The meaning of dreamsFor centuries, people have asked: why do we dream? What do our dreams mean? Today, science doesn’t have definite answers to t hese questions, but we do know some things about dreams. First, we all dream, often 4 to 5 times a night. Second, we don’t usually remember most of our dreams. And finally, when we dream, our brains are very active. Thousands of years ago, people began to study dreams. In many cultures, people believed dreams were messages from spirits or gods. Later, the ancient Greeks and Romans had a new idea: Dreams come from a person’s mind. Doctors studied dreams to help sick or worried people.I n the past, some cultures used dreams to predict the future. They thought dreams could help a person choose a husband or wife, guess a baby’s birthday, or starts a business. IN some places, this practice is still common.Today, scientists think dreams are about our thoughts and feelings. Our minds send us messages about our lives. Unfortunately, many messages are often strange or confusing. People wake up and think: What did that dream mean?。